Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 27858:40562a8d6d83
(Fx_hide_busy_cursor): Remove prototype.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Fri, 25 Feb 2000 13:28:41 +0000 |
parents | ecfe912fd73c |
children | 7634011b93f3 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
103 | |
104 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
105 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
106 | |
107 struct dim | |
108 { | |
109 int width; | |
110 int height; | |
111 }; | |
112 | |
113 | |
114 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
115 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
116 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
117 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 118 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
119 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
120 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
121 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
122 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
123 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
124 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
125 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
126 struct dim)); | |
127 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
128 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
129 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
130 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
131 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
132 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
133 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 134 static void swap_glyphs_in_rows P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
135 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
136 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
137 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
138 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
139 struct window *)); | |
140 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
141 struct window *)); | |
142 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
143 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
144 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
145 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
146 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
147 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
148 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
149 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
150 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
151 int, int)); | |
152 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
153 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
154 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
155 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 156 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
157 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 158 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
159 int)); | |
160 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
161 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
162 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 163 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
164 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
165 #endif |
25012 | 166 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
167 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
168 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
169 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
170 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
171 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
172 struct glyph_row *)); | |
173 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
174 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
175 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
176 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
177 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
178 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 179 |
180 | |
181 | |
182 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
183 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
184 scrolling. */ | |
185 | |
186 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
187 |
554 | 188 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 189 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 190 |
764 | 191 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 192 |
25012 | 193 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 194 |
195 int display_completed; | |
196 | |
25012 | 197 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
198 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 199 |
200 int visible_bell; | |
201 | |
764 | 202 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 203 |
204 int inverse_video; | |
205 | |
206 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
207 | |
208 int baud_rate; | |
209 | |
25012 | 210 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
211 is running. */ | |
314 | 212 |
213 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
214 | |
215 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 216 |
314 | 217 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
218 | |
25012 | 219 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
220 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 221 |
222 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 223 as a character code. |
224 | |
225 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
226 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 227 |
228 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
229 | |
230 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
231 | |
232 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
233 | |
25012 | 234 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
235 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
236 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
237 | |
314 | 238 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
239 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
240 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 241 |
314 | 242 |
25012 | 243 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
244 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
245 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
246 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 247 |
248 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 249 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 250 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
251 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 252 |
253 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
254 | |
255 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
256 | |
257 FILE *termscript; | |
258 | |
259 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
260 | |
261 struct cm Wcm; | |
262 | |
263 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
264 | |
265 int delayed_size_change; | |
266 | |
267 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
268 | |
269 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
270 | |
271 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
272 | |
273 struct window *updated_window; | |
274 | |
275 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
276 | |
277 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
278 int updated_area; | |
279 | |
280 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
281 | |
282 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
283 | |
284 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
285 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
286 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
287 | |
288 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
289 | |
290 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
291 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
292 | |
293 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
294 int glyph_pool_count; | |
295 | |
296 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
297 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
298 | |
299 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
300 | |
301 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
302 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
303 | |
304 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
305 | |
306 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
307 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
308 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
309 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
310 loaded on demand. */ | |
311 | |
312 int fonts_changed_p; | |
313 | |
314 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
315 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
316 | |
317 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
318 | |
319 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
320 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
321 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
322 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
323 | |
324 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
325 | |
326 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
327 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
328 | |
329 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
330 | |
331 | |
332 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
333 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
334 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 335 |
336 void | |
337 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
338 char *from, *to; | |
339 int size; | |
340 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
341 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 342 return; |
343 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
344 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
346 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
347 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 else |
314 | 352 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
354 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 355 |
356 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
357 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
358 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
359 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
360 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
361 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 362 if (to - from < 64) |
363 { | |
364 do | |
365 *--endt = *--endf; | |
366 while (endf != from); | |
367 } | |
368 else | |
369 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
370 for (;;) |
314 | 371 { |
372 endt -= (to - from); | |
373 endf -= (to - from); | |
374 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
375 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
376 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
377 |
314 | 378 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
379 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
380 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
381 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 382 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
383 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 384 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
385 } | |
386 } | |
387 } | |
388 | |
25012 | 389 |
390 | |
391 /*********************************************************************** | |
392 Glyph Matrices | |
393 ***********************************************************************/ | |
394 | |
395 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
396 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
397 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
398 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
399 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
400 | |
401 struct glyph_matrix * | |
402 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
403 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
404 { | |
405 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
406 | |
407 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
408 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
409 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
410 | |
411 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
412 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
413 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
414 | |
415 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
416 result->pool = pool; | |
417 return result; | |
418 } | |
419 | |
420 | |
421 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
422 | |
423 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
424 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
425 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
426 pointer was passed to this function. | |
427 | |
428 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
429 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
430 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
431 | |
432 static void | |
433 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
434 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
435 { | |
436 if (matrix) | |
437 { | |
438 int i; | |
439 | |
440 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
441 allocated. */ | |
442 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
443 abort (); | |
444 | |
445 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
446 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
447 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
448 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
449 | |
450 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
451 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
452 xfree (matrix); | |
453 } | |
454 } | |
455 | |
456 | |
457 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
458 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
459 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
460 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
461 or a float. */ | |
462 | |
463 static int | |
464 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
465 struct window *w; | |
466 int total_glyphs; | |
467 Lisp_Object margin; | |
468 { | |
469 int n; | |
470 | |
471 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
472 { | |
473 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
474 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
475 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
476 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
477 } | |
478 else | |
479 n = 0; | |
480 | |
481 return n; | |
482 } | |
483 | |
484 | |
485 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
486 window sizes. | |
487 | |
488 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
489 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
490 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
491 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
492 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
493 | |
494 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
495 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
496 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
497 MATRIX->pool. | |
498 | |
499 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
500 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
501 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
502 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
503 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
504 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
505 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
506 | |
507 static void | |
508 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
509 struct window *w; | |
510 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
511 int x, y; | |
512 struct dim dim; | |
513 { | |
514 int i; | |
515 int new_rows; | |
516 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 517 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
518 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 519 int left = -1, right = -1; |
520 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
521 | |
522 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
523 if (w) | |
524 { | |
25546 | 525 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
526 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 527 } |
25546 | 528 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 529 |
530 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
531 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
532 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
533 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
534 { | |
535 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
536 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
537 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
538 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
539 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
540 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
541 | |
542 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
543 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 544 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 545 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
546 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
547 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
548 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
549 return; | |
550 } | |
551 | |
552 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
553 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
554 { | |
555 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
556 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
557 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
558 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
559 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
560 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
561 } | |
562 else | |
563 new_rows = 0; | |
564 | |
565 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
566 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
567 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
568 if (matrix->pool) | |
569 { | |
570 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
571 | |
572 if (w) | |
573 { | |
574 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
575 w->left_margin_width); | |
576 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
577 w->right_margin_width); | |
578 } | |
579 else | |
580 left = right = 0; | |
581 | |
582 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
583 { | |
584 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
585 | |
586 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
587 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
588 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
589 + x); | |
590 | |
591 if (w == NULL | |
592 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 593 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 594 { |
595 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
596 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
597 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
598 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
599 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
600 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
601 } | |
602 else | |
603 { | |
604 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
605 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
606 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
607 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
608 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
609 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
610 } | |
611 } | |
612 | |
613 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
614 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
615 } | |
616 else | |
617 { | |
618 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
619 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
620 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
621 || new_rows | |
25546 | 622 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 623 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
624 { | |
625 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
626 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
627 | |
628 while (row < end) | |
629 { | |
630 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
631 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
632 (dim.width | |
633 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
634 | |
635 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
636 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 637 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 638 { |
639 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
640 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
641 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
642 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
643 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
644 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
645 } | |
646 else | |
647 { | |
648 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
649 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
650 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
651 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
652 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
653 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
654 } | |
655 ++row; | |
656 } | |
657 } | |
658 | |
659 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
660 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
661 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
662 } | |
663 | |
664 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
665 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
666 | |
667 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
668 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
669 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
670 when this function runs. */ | |
671 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
672 { | |
673 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
674 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
675 of the window. */ | |
676 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
677 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
678 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
679 { | |
680 i = 0; | |
681 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
682 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
683 < matrix->window_height)) | |
684 ++i; | |
685 | |
686 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
687 are invalidated. */ | |
688 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
689 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
690 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
691 | |
692 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
693 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
694 } | |
695 else | |
696 { | |
697 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
698 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
699 } | |
700 } | |
701 | |
702 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
703 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
704 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
705 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
706 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
707 | |
708 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
709 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
710 if (w) | |
711 { | |
712 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
713 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
714 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
715 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
716 } | |
717 } | |
718 | |
719 | |
720 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
721 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
722 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
723 below). */ | |
314 | 724 |
725 static void | |
25012 | 726 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
727 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
728 int start, end; | |
314 | 729 { |
25012 | 730 int i, j; |
731 | |
732 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
733 { | |
734 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
735 initialization. */ | |
736 struct glyph_row temp; | |
737 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
738 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
739 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
740 } | |
314 | 741 } |
742 | |
25012 | 743 |
744 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
745 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
746 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
747 row structures are moved around). | |
748 | |
749 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
750 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
751 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
752 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
753 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
754 rotating right. */ | |
755 | |
756 void | |
757 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
758 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
759 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 760 { |
25012 | 761 if (by < 0) |
762 { | |
763 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
764 by = -by; | |
765 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
766 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
767 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
768 } | |
769 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 770 { |
25012 | 771 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
772 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
773 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
774 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 775 } |
25012 | 776 } |
777 | |
778 | |
779 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
780 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
781 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
782 | |
783 void | |
784 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, | |
785 delta_bytes) | |
786 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
787 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
788 { | |
789 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
790 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
791 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
792 xassert (start <= end); | |
793 | |
794 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
795 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (matrix->rows + start, | |
796 delta, delta_bytes); | |
797 } | |
798 | |
799 | |
800 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
801 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
802 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
803 | |
804 void | |
805 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
806 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
807 int start, end; | |
808 int enabled_p; | |
809 { | |
810 xassert (start <= end); | |
811 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
812 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
813 | |
814 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
815 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
816 } | |
817 | |
818 | |
819 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
820 | |
821 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
822 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
823 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
824 enabled_p flag. | |
825 | |
826 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
827 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
828 | |
829 void | |
830 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
831 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
832 { | |
833 if (matrix) | |
314 | 834 { |
25012 | 835 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
836 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 837 } |
838 } | |
25012 | 839 |
840 | |
841 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
842 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
843 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
844 | |
845 void | |
846 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
847 struct window *w; | |
848 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
849 int start, end, dy; | |
850 { | |
851 int min_y, max_y; | |
852 | |
853 xassert (start <= end); | |
854 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
855 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
856 | |
25546 | 857 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 858 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
859 | |
860 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
861 { | |
862 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
863 | |
864 row->y += dy; | |
865 | |
866 if (row->y < min_y) | |
867 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
868 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
869 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
870 else | |
871 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
872 } | |
873 } | |
874 | |
875 | |
876 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
877 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
878 current matrix. */ | |
879 | |
880 void | |
881 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
882 register struct frame *f; | |
883 { | |
884 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
885 if (f->current_matrix) | |
886 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
887 | |
888 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
889 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
890 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
891 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
892 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
893 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
894 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
895 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
896 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 897 |
898 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
899 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
900 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
901 } | |
902 | |
903 | |
904 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 905 |
21514 | 906 void |
25012 | 907 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
908 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 909 { |
25012 | 910 if (f->desired_matrix) |
911 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
912 | |
913 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
914 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
915 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
916 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
917 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 918 |
919 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
920 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
921 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
922 } | |
923 | |
924 | |
925 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
926 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
927 | |
928 static void | |
929 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
930 struct window *w; | |
931 int desired_p; | |
932 { | |
933 while (w) | |
314 | 934 { |
25012 | 935 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
936 { | |
937 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
938 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
939 } | |
940 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 941 { |
25012 | 942 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
943 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
944 } | |
945 else | |
946 { | |
947 if (desired_p) | |
948 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
949 else | |
314 | 950 { |
25012 | 951 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
952 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 953 } |
25012 | 954 } |
955 | |
956 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
957 } | |
958 } | |
959 | |
960 | |
961 | |
962 /*********************************************************************** | |
963 Glyph Rows | |
964 | |
965 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
966 ***********************************************************************/ | |
967 | |
968 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
969 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
970 structure members. */ | |
971 | |
972 void | |
973 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
974 struct glyph_row *row; | |
975 { | |
976 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
977 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
978 | |
979 /* Save pointers. */ | |
980 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
981 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
982 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
983 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
984 | |
985 /* Clear. */ | |
986 *row = null_row; | |
987 | |
988 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
989 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
990 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
991 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
992 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
993 } | |
994 | |
995 | |
996 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
997 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
998 | |
999 void | |
1000 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
1001 struct window *w; | |
1002 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1003 int y; | |
1004 { | |
1005 int min_y, max_y; | |
1006 | |
25546 | 1007 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1008 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1009 | |
1010 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1011 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1012 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1013 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1014 |
1015 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1016 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1017 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1018 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1019 else | |
1020 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1021 | |
1022 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1023 } | |
1024 | |
1025 | |
1026 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1027 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1028 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1029 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1030 ends. */ | |
1031 | |
1032 void | |
1033 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1034 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1035 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1036 { | |
1037 int area, i; | |
1038 | |
1039 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1040 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1041 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1042 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1043 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1044 | |
1045 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1046 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1047 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1048 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1049 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1050 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1051 | |
1052 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1053 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1054 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1055 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1056 } | |
1057 | |
1058 | |
1059 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph | |
1060 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1061 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1062 | |
1063 static void | |
1064 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1065 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1066 { | |
1067 int area; | |
1068 | |
1069 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1070 { | |
1071 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1072 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1073 | |
1074 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1075 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1076 | |
1077 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1078 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1079 | |
1080 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1081 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1082 | |
1083 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1084 { | |
1085 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1086 initialization. */ | |
1087 struct glyph temp; | |
1088 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1089 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1090 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1091 ++glyph_a; | |
1092 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1093 } |
1094 } | |
1095 } | |
25012 | 1096 |
1097 | |
1098 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1099 | |
1100 static INLINE void | |
1101 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1102 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1103 { | |
1104 int i; | |
1105 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1106 { | |
1107 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1108 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1109 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1110 } | |
1111 } | |
1112 | |
1113 | |
1114 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1115 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1116 | |
1117 INLINE void | |
1118 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1119 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1120 { | |
1121 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1122 | |
1123 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1124 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1125 | |
1126 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1127 *to = *from; | |
1128 | |
1129 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1130 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1131 } | |
1132 | |
1133 | |
1134 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1135 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1136 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1137 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1138 | |
1139 void | |
1140 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1141 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1142 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1143 { | |
1144 int area; | |
1145 | |
1146 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1147 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1148 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1149 | |
1150 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1151 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1152 if (from->used[area]) | |
1153 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1154 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1155 | |
1156 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
1157 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); | |
1158 } | |
1159 | |
1160 | |
1161 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1162 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1163 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1164 a memory leak. */ | |
1165 | |
1166 static INLINE void | |
1167 assign_row (to, from) | |
1168 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1169 { | |
1170 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1171 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1172 } | |
1173 | |
1174 | |
1175 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1176 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1177 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1178 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1179 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1180 | |
1181 static int | |
1182 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1183 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1184 { | |
1185 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1186 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1187 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1188 | |
1189 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1190 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1191 } | |
1192 | |
1193 | |
1194 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice | |
1195 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1196 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1197 | |
1198 static struct glyph_row * | |
1199 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1200 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1201 int row; | |
1202 { | |
1203 int i; | |
1204 | |
1205 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1206 | |
1207 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1208 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1209 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1210 break; | |
1211 | |
1212 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1213 } | |
1214 | |
1215 | |
1216 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1217 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1218 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1219 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1220 | |
1221 void | |
1222 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1223 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1224 { | |
1225 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1226 { | |
1227 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1228 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1229 } | |
1230 } | |
1231 | |
1232 | |
1233 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1234 | |
1235 int | |
1236 line_hash_code (row) | |
1237 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1238 { | |
1239 int hash = 0; | |
1240 | |
1241 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1242 { | |
1243 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1244 { | |
1245 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1246 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1247 hash = -1; | |
1248 } | |
1249 else | |
1250 { | |
1251 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1252 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1253 | |
1254 while (glyph < end) | |
1255 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1256 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1257 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1258 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1259 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1260 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1261 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1262 ++glyph; |
1263 } | |
1264 | |
1265 if (hash == 0) | |
1266 hash = 1; | |
1267 } | |
1268 } | |
1269 | |
1270 return hash; | |
1271 } | |
1272 | |
1273 | |
1274 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1275 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1276 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1277 | |
1278 static unsigned int | |
1279 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1280 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1281 int vpos; | |
1282 { | |
1283 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1284 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1285 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1286 int len; | |
1287 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1288 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1289 | |
1290 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1291 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1292 { | |
1293 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1294 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1295 --end; | |
1296 | |
1297 /* All blank line. */ | |
1298 if (end == beg) | |
1299 return 0; | |
1300 | |
1301 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1302 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1303 ++beg; | |
1304 } | |
1305 | |
1306 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1307 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1308 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1309 len = end - beg; | |
1310 else | |
1311 { | |
1312 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1313 in LEN. */ | |
1314 len = 0; | |
1315 while (beg < end) | |
1316 { | |
1317 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1318 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1319 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1320 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1321 len += 1; |
1322 else | |
1323 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1324 | |
1325 ++beg; | |
1326 } | |
1327 } | |
1328 | |
1329 return len; | |
1330 } | |
1331 | |
1332 | |
1333 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1334 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1335 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
1336 visibility. */ | |
1337 | |
1338 static INLINE int | |
1339 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
1340 struct window *w; | |
1341 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1342 { | |
1343 if (a == b) | |
1344 return 1; | |
1345 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1346 return 0; | |
1347 else | |
1348 { | |
1349 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1350 int area; | |
1351 | |
1352 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
1353 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1354 { | |
1355 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1356 return 0; | |
1357 | |
1358 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1359 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1360 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1361 | |
1362 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1363 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1364 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1365 | |
1366 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1367 return 0; | |
1368 } | |
1369 | |
1370 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1371 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1372 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1373 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1374 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1375 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1376 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1377 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1378 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1379 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1380 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1381 || a->x != b->x | |
1382 /* Different height. */ | |
1383 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1384 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1385 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1386 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1387 return 0; | |
1388 } | |
1389 | |
1390 return 1; | |
1391 } | |
1392 | |
1393 | |
314 | 1394 |
25012 | 1395 /*********************************************************************** |
1396 Glyph Pool | |
1397 | |
1398 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1399 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1400 | |
1401 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1402 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1403 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1404 | |
1405 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1406 new_glyph_pool () | |
1407 { | |
1408 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1409 | |
1410 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1411 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1412 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1413 | |
1414 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1415 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1416 | |
1417 return result; | |
1418 } | |
1419 | |
1420 | |
1421 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1422 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1423 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1424 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1425 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1426 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1427 | |
1428 static void | |
1429 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1430 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1431 { | |
1432 if (pool) | |
1433 { | |
1434 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1435 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1436 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1437 | |
1438 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1439 xfree (pool); | |
1440 } | |
1441 } | |
1442 | |
1443 | |
1444 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1445 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1446 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1447 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1448 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1449 | |
1450 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1451 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1452 | |
1453 static int | |
1454 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1455 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1456 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1457 { | |
1458 int needed; | |
1459 int changed_p; | |
1460 | |
1461 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1462 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1463 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1464 | |
1465 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1466 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1467 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1468 { | |
1469 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1470 | |
1471 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1472 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1473 else | |
1474 { | |
1475 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1476 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1477 } | |
1478 | |
1479 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1480 } | |
1481 | |
1482 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1483 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1484 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1485 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1486 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1487 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1488 | |
1489 return changed_p; | |
1490 } | |
1491 | |
1492 | |
1493 | |
1494 /*********************************************************************** | |
1495 Debug Code | |
1496 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1497 | |
1498 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1499 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1500 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1501 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1502 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1503 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1504 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1505 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1506 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1507 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1508 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1509 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1510 |
25012 | 1511 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1512 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1513 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1514 MATRIX. */ | |
1515 | |
1516 void | |
1517 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1518 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1519 { | |
1520 int i, j; | |
1521 | |
1522 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1523 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1524 xassert (i == j | |
1525 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1526 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1527 } | |
1528 | |
1529 | |
1530 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1531 | |
1532 struct glyph_row * | |
1533 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1534 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1535 int row; | |
1536 { | |
1537 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1538 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1539 | |
1540 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1541 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1542 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1543 #if 0 |
25012 | 1544 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1545 #endif | |
1546 | |
1547 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1548 } | |
1549 | |
1550 | |
1551 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1552 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1553 nevertheless. */ | |
1554 | |
1555 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1556 window W. */ | |
1557 | |
1558 static void | |
1559 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1560 struct window *w; |
1561 { | |
25012 | 1562 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1563 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1564 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1565 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1566 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1567 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1568 int c; | |
1569 | |
1570 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1571 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1572 return; | |
1573 | |
1574 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1575 | |
1576 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1577 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1578 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1579 { | |
1580 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1581 | |
1582 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1583 last_text_row = row; | |
1584 | |
1585 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1586 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1587 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1588 | |
1589 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1590 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1591 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1592 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1593 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1594 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1595 | |
1596 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1597 of next row. */ | |
1598 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1599 { | |
1600 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1601 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1602 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1603 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1604 } | |
1605 row = next; | |
1606 } | |
1607 | |
1608 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1609 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1610 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1611 } | |
1612 | |
1613 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1614 | |
1615 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1616 | |
1617 | |
1618 | |
1619 /********************************************************************** | |
1620 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1621 **********************************************************************/ | |
1622 | |
1623 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1624 redisplay | |
1625 | |
1626 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1627 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1628 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1629 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1630 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1631 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1632 performed. | |
1633 | |
1634 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1635 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1636 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1637 | |
1638 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1639 | |
1640 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1641 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1642 | |
1643 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1644 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1645 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1646 | |
1647 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1648 function. | |
1649 | |
1650 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1651 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1652 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1653 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1654 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1655 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1656 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1657 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1658 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1659 | |
1660 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1661 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1662 necessary. | |
1663 | |
1664 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1665 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1666 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1667 windows in the sequence. | |
1668 | |
1669 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1670 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1671 | | | | | | |
1672 | | | | | |
1673 +---------+ | | result height | |
1674 | +---------+ | |
1675 | | | | |
1676 +----------+ --- | |
1677 | |
1678 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1679 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1680 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1681 | |
1682 |<---- result width -->| | |
1683 +---------+ --- | |
1684 | | | | |
1685 | | | | |
1686 +---------+--+ | | |
1687 | | | | |
1688 | | result height | |
1689 | | | |
1690 +------------+---------+ | | |
1691 | | | | |
1692 | | | | |
1693 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1694 | |
1695 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1696 allocated. */ | |
1697 | |
1698 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1699 | |
1700 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1701 size. */ | |
1702 | |
1703 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1704 | |
1705 static struct dim | |
1706 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1707 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1708 Lisp_Object window; | |
1709 int x, y; | |
1710 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1711 int dim_only_p; | |
1712 int *window_change_flags; | |
1713 { | |
1714 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1715 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1716 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1717 struct dim total; | |
1718 struct dim dim; | |
1719 struct window *w; | |
1720 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1721 | |
1722 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1723 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1724 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1725 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1726 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1727 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1728 in_horz_combination_p | |
1729 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1730 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1731 | |
1732 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1733 do | |
1734 { | |
1735 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1736 | |
1737 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1738 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1739 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1740 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1741 dim_only_p, | |
1742 window_change_flags); | |
1743 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1744 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1745 dim_only_p, | |
1746 window_change_flags); | |
1747 else | |
1748 { | |
1749 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1750 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1751 { | |
1752 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1753 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1754 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1755 } | |
1756 | |
1757 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1758 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
1759 dim.width = w->width; | |
1760 dim.height = w->height; | |
1761 | |
1762 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1763 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1764 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1765 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1766 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1767 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1768 w->right_margin_width) | |
1769 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1770 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1771 w->left_margin_width) | |
1772 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1773 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1774 | |
1775 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1776 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1777 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1778 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1779 necessary. */ | |
1780 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1781 { | |
1782 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1783 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1784 } | |
1785 } | |
1786 | |
1787 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1788 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1789 below W. */ | |
1790 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1791 x += dim.width; | |
1792 else | |
1793 y += dim.height; | |
1794 | |
1795 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1796 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1797 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1798 | |
1799 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1800 window = w->next; | |
1801 } | |
1802 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1803 | |
1804 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1805 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1806 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1807 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1808 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1809 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1810 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1811 { | |
1812 total.width = x - x0; | |
1813 total.height = hmax; | |
1814 } | |
1815 else | |
1816 { | |
1817 total.width = wmax; | |
1818 total.height = y - y0; | |
1819 } | |
1820 | |
1821 return total; | |
1822 } | |
1823 | |
1824 | |
1825 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1826 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1827 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1828 | |
1829 static void | |
1830 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1831 struct window *w; | |
1832 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1833 { | |
1834 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1835 | |
1836 while (w) | |
314 | 1837 { |
25012 | 1838 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1839 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1840 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1841 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1842 else | |
314 | 1843 { |
25012 | 1844 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1845 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1846 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1847 struct dim dim; | |
1848 | |
1849 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1850 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1851 { |
25012 | 1852 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1853 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1854 } |
25012 | 1855 |
1856 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1857 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1858 / ch_dim.width) | |
1859 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1860 + 2 | |
1861 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1862 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1863 + 1 + 1); | |
1864 | |
1865 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1866 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1867 / ch_dim.height) | |
1868 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1869 bottom of the window. */ | |
1870 + 2 | |
1871 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1872 + 2); | |
1873 | |
1874 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1875 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1876 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1877 } | |
1878 | |
1879 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1880 } | |
1881 } | |
1882 | |
1883 | |
1884 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1885 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1886 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1887 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1888 | |
1889 void | |
1890 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1891 struct frame *f; | |
1892 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1893 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1894 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1895 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1896 |
25012 | 1897 if (f) |
1898 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1899 else | |
1900 { | |
1901 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1902 | |
1903 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1904 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1905 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1906 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1907 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1908 } |
1909 | |
1910 | |
1911 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1912 | |
1913 To be called from init_display. | |
1914 | |
1915 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1916 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1917 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1918 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1919 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1920 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1921 | |
1922 static void | |
1923 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1924 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1925 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1926 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1927 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1928 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1929 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1930 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1931 |
1932 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1933 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1934 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1935 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1936 |
1937 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1938 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1939 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1940 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1941 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1942 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1943 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1944 } | |
1945 | |
1946 | |
1947 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1948 | |
1949 static void | |
1950 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1951 struct frame *f; | |
1952 { | |
1953 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1954 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1955 else | |
1956 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1957 | |
1958 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1959 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1960 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1961 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1962 | |
1963 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1964 } | |
1965 | |
1966 | |
1967 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1968 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1969 | |
1970 static void | |
1971 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1972 struct frame *f; | |
1973 { | |
1974 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1975 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1976 int pool_changed_p; | |
1977 int window_change_flags; | |
1978 int top_window_y; | |
1979 | |
1980 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
1981 return; | |
1982 | |
1983 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
1984 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
1985 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
1986 | |
1987 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
1988 | |
1989 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
1990 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
1991 { | |
1992 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1993 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1994 } | |
1995 | |
1996 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
1997 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1998 { | |
1999 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2000 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2001 } | |
2002 | |
2003 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2004 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2005 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2006 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2007 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2008 matrix. */ | |
2009 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2010 matrix_dim | |
2011 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2012 0, top_window_y, | |
2013 ch_dim, 1, | |
2014 &window_change_flags); | |
2015 | |
2016 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2017 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2018 | |
2019 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2020 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2021 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2022 | |
2023 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2024 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2025 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2026 { | |
2027 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2028 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2029 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2030 &window_change_flags); | |
2031 | |
2032 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2033 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2034 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2035 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2036 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2037 | |
2038 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2039 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2040 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2041 | |
2042 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2043 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2044 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2045 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2046 } | |
2047 } | |
2048 | |
2049 | |
2050 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2051 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2052 | |
2053 static void | |
2054 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2055 struct frame *f; | |
2056 { | |
2057 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2058 struct window *w; | |
2059 | |
2060 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2061 | |
2062 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2063 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2064 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2065 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2066 #else | |
2067 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2068 #endif | |
2069 | |
2070 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2071 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2072 ch_dim); | |
2073 | |
2074 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2075 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2076 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2077 { | |
2078 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2079 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2080 { | |
2081 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2082 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2083 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2084 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2085 } | |
2086 else | |
2087 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2088 | |
2089 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2090 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2091 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2092 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2093 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2094 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2095 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2096 } | |
2097 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2098 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2099 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2100 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2101 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2102 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2103 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2104 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2105 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2106 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2107 } | |
2108 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2109 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2110 |
2111 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2112 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2113 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2114 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2115 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2116 } | |
2117 | |
2118 | |
2119 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2120 | |
2121 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2122 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2123 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2124 | |
2125 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2126 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2127 | |
2128 static void | |
2129 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2130 struct frame *f; | |
2131 { | |
2132 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2133 | |
2134 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2135 { | |
2136 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2137 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2138 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2139 } | |
2140 else | |
2141 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2142 } | |
2143 | |
2144 | |
2145 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2146 | |
2147 static void | |
2148 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2149 struct frame *f; | |
2150 { | |
2151 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2152 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2153 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2154 } | |
2155 | |
2156 | |
2157 | |
2158 /********************************************************************** | |
2159 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2160 **********************************************************************/ | |
2161 | |
2162 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2163 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2164 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2165 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2166 | |
2167 void | |
2168 free_glyphs (f) | |
2169 struct frame *f; | |
2170 { | |
2171 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2172 { | |
2173 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; | |
2174 | |
2175 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2176 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2177 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2178 | |
2179 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2180 glyph matrices. */ | |
2181 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2182 { | |
2183 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2184 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2185 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2186 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2187 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2188 } | |
2189 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2190 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2191 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2192 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2193 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2194 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2195 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2196 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2197 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2198 } |
2199 | |
2200 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2201 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2202 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2203 { | |
2204 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2205 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2206 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2207 } | |
2208 | |
2209 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2210 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2211 { | |
2212 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2213 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2214 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2215 } |
2216 } | |
2217 } | |
2218 | |
25012 | 2219 |
2220 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2221 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2222 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2223 | |
2224 void | |
2225 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2226 struct window *w; | |
2227 { | |
2228 while (w) | |
2229 { | |
2230 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2231 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2232 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2233 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2234 else | |
2235 { | |
2236 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2237 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2238 W. */ | |
2239 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2240 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2241 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2242 } | |
2243 | |
2244 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2245 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2246 } | |
2247 } | |
2248 | |
2249 | |
2250 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2251 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2252 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2253 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2254 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2255 void |
25012 | 2256 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2257 { |
25012 | 2258 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2259 | |
2260 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2261 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2262 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2263 | |
2264 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2265 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2266 abort (); | |
2267 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2268 abort (); | |
2269 } | |
2270 | |
2271 | |
2272 | |
2273 /********************************************************************** | |
2274 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2275 **********************************************************************/ | |
2276 | |
2277 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2278 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2279 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2280 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2281 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2282 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2283 window matrices in this section. | |
2284 | |
2285 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2286 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2287 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2288 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2289 | |
2290 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2291 | desired | desired | | |
2292 | | | | |
2293 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2294 | current | | |
2295 | | | |
2296 +----------------------------------+ | |
2297 | |
2298 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2299 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2300 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2301 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2302 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2303 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2304 | |
2305 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2306 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2307 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2308 enabled. | |
2309 | |
2310 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2311 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2312 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2313 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2314 | |
2315 This problem is solved like this: | |
2316 | |
2317 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2318 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2319 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2320 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2321 automatically. | |
2322 | |
2323 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2324 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2325 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2326 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2327 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2328 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2329 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2330 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2331 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2332 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2333 | |
2334 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2335 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2336 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2337 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2338 | |
2339 static void | |
2340 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2341 struct frame *f; | |
2342 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2343 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2344 |
25012 | 2345 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2346 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2347 | |
2348 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2349 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2350 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2351 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2352 | |
2353 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2354 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2355 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2356 } | |
2357 | |
2358 | |
2359 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2360 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2361 | |
2362 static void | |
2363 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2364 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2365 struct window *w; | |
2366 { | |
2367 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2368 { |
25012 | 2369 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2370 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2371 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2372 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2373 else | |
2374 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2375 | |
2376 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2377 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2378 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2379 |
25012 | 2380 |
2381 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2382 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2383 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2384 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2385 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2386 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2387 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2388 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2389 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2390 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2391 | |
2392 static void | |
2393 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2394 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2395 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2396 { |
25012 | 2397 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2398 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2399 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2400 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2401 | |
2402 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2403 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2404 { | |
2405 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2406 | |
2407 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2408 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2409 { | |
2410 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2411 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2412 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2413 : '|'); | |
2414 } | |
2415 } | |
2416 else | |
2417 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2418 | |
2419 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2420 frame matrix. */ | |
2421 window_y = 0; | |
2422 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2423 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2424 { |
25012 | 2425 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2426 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2427 | |
2428 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2429 window row. */ | |
2430 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2431 | |
2432 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2433 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2434 | |
2435 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2436 { |
25012 | 2437 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2438 row to frame row. */ | |
2439 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2440 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2441 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2442 } | |
2443 else | |
2444 { | |
2445 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2446 | |
2447 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2448 windows. */ | |
2449 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2450 { | |
2451 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2452 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2453 } | |
2454 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2455 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2456 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2457 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2458 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2459 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2460 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2461 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2462 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2463 { |
25012 | 2464 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2465 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2466 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2467 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2468 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2469 | |
2470 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2471 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2472 | |
2473 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2474 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2475 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2476 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2477 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2478 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2479 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2480 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2481 |
25012 | 2482 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2483 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2484 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2485 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2486 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2487 #endif |
25012 | 2488 } |
2489 | |
2490 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2491 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2492 can be done simply. */ | |
2493 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2494 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2495 | |
2496 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2497 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2498 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2499 | |
2500 /* Next row. */ | |
2501 ++window_y; | |
2502 ++frame_y; | |
2503 } | |
2504 } | |
2505 | |
2506 | |
2507 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2508 | |
2509 Each row has the form: | |
2510 | |
2511 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2512 | left | text | right | | |
2513 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2514 | |
2515 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2516 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2517 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2518 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2519 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2520 | |
2521 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2522 | |
2523 static void | |
2524 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2525 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2526 { | |
2527 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2528 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2529 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2530 } | |
2531 | |
2532 | |
2533 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2534 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2535 | |
2536 static void | |
2537 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2538 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2539 int area; | |
2540 { | |
2541 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2542 { | |
2543 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2544 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2545 | |
2546 while (text < end) | |
2547 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2548 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2549 } | |
2550 } | |
2551 | |
2552 | |
2553 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2554 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2555 | |
2556 static void | |
2557 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2558 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2559 int upto; | |
2560 { | |
2561 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2562 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2563 | |
2564 while (i < upto) | |
2565 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2566 | |
2567 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2568 } | |
2569 | |
2570 | |
2571 | |
2572 /********************************************************************** | |
2573 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2574 **********************************************************************/ | |
2575 | |
2576 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2577 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2578 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2579 | |
2580 static INLINE void | |
2581 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2582 struct frame *f; | |
2583 { | |
2584 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2585 } | |
2586 | |
2587 | |
2588 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2589 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2590 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2591 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2592 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2593 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2594 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2595 | |
2596 static INLINE void | |
2597 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2598 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2599 int row; | |
2600 { | |
2601 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2602 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2603 | |
2604 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2605 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2606 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2607 | |
2608 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2609 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2610 | |
2611 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2612 for window matrices. */ | |
2613 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2614 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2615 } | |
2616 | |
2617 | |
2618 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2619 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2620 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2621 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2622 | |
2623 static void | |
2624 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2625 struct window *w; | |
2626 int frame_row; | |
2627 { | |
2628 while (w) | |
2629 { | |
2630 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2631 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2632 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2633 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2634 else | |
2635 { | |
2636 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2637 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2638 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2639 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2640 | |
2641 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2642 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2643 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2644 { |
25012 | 2645 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2646 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2647 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2648 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2649 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2650 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2651 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2652 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2653 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2654 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2655 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2656 } |
25012 | 2657 |
2658 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2659 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2660 } |
25012 | 2661 |
2662 | |
2663 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2664 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2665 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2666 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2667 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2668 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2669 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2670 | |
2671 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2672 | |
2673 void | |
2674 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2675 retained_p) | |
2676 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2677 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2678 int *copy_from; | |
2679 char *retained_p; | |
2680 { | |
2681 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2682 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2683 | |
2684 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2685 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2686 | |
2687 int i; | |
2688 | |
2689 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2690 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2691 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2692 | |
2693 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2694 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2695 { | |
2696 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2697 | |
2698 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2699 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2700 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2701 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2702 | |
2703 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2704 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2705 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2706 } | |
2707 | |
2708 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2709 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2710 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2711 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2712 } | |
2713 | |
2714 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2715 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2716 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2717 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2718 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2719 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2720 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2721 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2722 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2723 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2724 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2725 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2726 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2727 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2728 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2729 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2730 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2731 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2732 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2733 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2734 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2735 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2736 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2737 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2738 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2739 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2740 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2741 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2742 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2743 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2744 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2745 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2746 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2747 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2748 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2749 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2750 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2751 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2752 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2753 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2754 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2755 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2756 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2757 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2758 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2759 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2760 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2761 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2762 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2763 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2764 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2765 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2766 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2767 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2768 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2769 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2770 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2771 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 |
25012 | 2777 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2778 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2779 | |
2780 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2781 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2782 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2783 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2784 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2785 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2786 which is empty. */ | |
2787 | |
2788 static void | |
2789 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2790 struct window *w; | |
2791 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2792 int *copy_from; | |
2793 char *retained_p; | |
2794 { | |
2795 while (w) | |
2796 { | |
2797 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2798 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2799 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2800 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2801 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2802 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2803 else | |
2804 { | |
2805 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2806 matrix m. */ | |
2807 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2808 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2809 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2810 | |
2811 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2812 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2813 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2814 | |
2815 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2816 { | |
2817 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2818 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2819 | |
2820 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2821 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2822 | |
2823 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2824 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2825 | |
2826 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2827 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2828 | |
2829 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2830 int from_inside_window_p | |
2831 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2832 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2833 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2834 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2835 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2836 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2837 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2838 { |
2839 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2840 int enabled_before_p; | |
2841 | |
2842 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2843 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2844 that. */ | |
2845 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2846 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2847 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2848 | |
2849 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2850 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2851 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2852 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2853 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2854 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2855 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2856 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2857 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2858 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2859 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2860 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2861 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2862 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2863 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2864 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2865 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2866 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2867 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2868 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2869 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2870 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2871 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2872 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2873 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2874 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2875 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2876 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2877 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2878 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2879 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2880 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2881 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2882 |
2883 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2884 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2885 } | |
2886 | |
2887 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2888 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2889 } | |
2890 } | |
2891 | |
2892 | |
2893 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2894 | |
2895 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2896 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2897 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2898 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2899 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2900 |
21514 | 2901 void |
25012 | 2902 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2903 struct window *w; |
2904 { | |
25012 | 2905 while (w) |
2906 { | |
2907 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2908 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2909 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2910 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2911 else | |
2912 { | |
2913 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2914 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2915 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2916 } | |
2917 | |
2918 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2919 } | |
2920 } | |
2921 | |
2922 | |
2923 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2924 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2925 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2926 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2927 | |
2928 static void | |
2929 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2930 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2931 { | |
2932 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2933 int i = 0; | |
2934 | |
2935 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2936 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2937 | |
2938 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2939 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2940 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2941 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2942 { | |
2943 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2944 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2945 abort (); | |
2946 ++i, ++j; | |
2947 } | |
2948 } | |
2949 | |
2950 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2951 | |
2952 | |
2953 | |
2954 /********************************************************************** | |
2955 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2956 **********************************************************************/ | |
2957 | |
2958 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2959 | |
2960 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2961 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2962 | |
2963 static int | |
2964 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2965 struct window *w; | |
2966 int vpos; | |
2967 { | |
2968 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2969 | |
2970 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2971 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2972 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2973 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2974 return vpos; | |
2975 } | |
2976 | |
2977 | |
2978 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
2979 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2980 | |
2981 static int | |
2982 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
2983 struct window *w; | |
2984 int hpos; | |
2985 { | |
2986 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2987 | |
2988 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2989 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
2990 return hpos; | |
314 | 2991 } |
25012 | 2992 |
2993 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
2994 | |
2995 | |
314 | 2996 |
25012 | 2997 /********************************************************************** |
2998 Redrawing Frames | |
2999 **********************************************************************/ | |
3000 | |
3001 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3002 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3003 (frame) | |
3004 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3005 { | |
3006 struct frame *f; | |
3007 | |
3008 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3009 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3010 | |
3011 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3012 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3013 called so early here). */ | |
3014 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3015 return Qnil; | |
3016 | |
3017 update_begin (f); | |
3018 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3019 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3020 clear_frame (); | |
3021 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3022 update_end (f); | |
3023 fflush (stdout); | |
3024 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3025 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3026 its redisplay done. */ | |
3027 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3028 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3029 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3030 return Qnil; | |
3031 } | |
3032 | |
3033 | |
3034 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3035 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3036 | |
3037 void | |
3038 redraw_frame (f) | |
3039 struct frame *f; | |
3040 { | |
3041 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3042 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3043 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3044 } | |
3045 | |
3046 | |
3047 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3048 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3049 () | |
3050 { | |
3051 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3052 | |
3053 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3054 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3055 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3056 | |
3057 return Qnil; | |
3058 } | |
3059 | |
3060 | |
3061 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3062 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3063 | |
3064 void | |
3065 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3066 { | |
3067 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3068 | |
3069 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3070 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3071 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3072 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3073 } | |
3074 | |
3075 | |
3076 | |
3077 /*********************************************************************** | |
3078 Direct Operations | |
3079 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3080 | |
3081 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3082 | |
3083 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3084 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3085 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3086 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3087 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3088 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3089 | |
3090 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3091 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3092 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3093 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3094 |
3095 int | |
3096 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3097 int g; | |
3098 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3099 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3100 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3101 struct it it, it2; | |
3102 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3103 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3104 int n; | |
3105 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3106 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3107 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3108 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3109 int added_width; | |
3110 struct text_pos pos; | |
3111 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3112 | |
3113 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3114 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3115 | |
3116 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3117 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3118 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3119 || fonts_changed_p | |
3120 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3121 || face_change_count | |
3122 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3123 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3124 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3125 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3126 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3127 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3128 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3129 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3130 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3131 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3132 || (overwrite_p | |
3133 && PT != ZV | |
3134 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3135 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3136 || g == '\t' | |
3137 || g == '\n' | |
3138 || g == '\r' | |
3139 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3140 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3141 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3142 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3143 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3144 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3145 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3146 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3147 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3148 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3149 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3150 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3151 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3152 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3153 return 0; | |
3154 | |
3155 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3156 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3157 position. */ | |
3158 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3159 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
3160 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos); | |
3161 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, | |
3162 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3163 | |
3164 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3165 | |
3166 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3167 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3168 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3169 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3170 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3171 { | |
3172 struct glyph *last; | |
3173 | |
3174 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3175 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3176 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3177 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3178 return 0; |
3179 } | |
3180 | |
3181 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3182 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3183 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3184 return 0; | |
3185 | |
3186 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3187 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3188 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3189 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3190 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3191 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3192 | |
3193 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3194 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3195 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3196 combination of both. */ | |
3197 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3198 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3199 { | |
3200 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3201 | |
3202 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3203 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3204 return 0; | |
3205 | |
3206 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3207 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3208 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3209 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3210 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3211 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3212 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3213 return 0; | |
3214 | |
3215 delta += 1; | |
3216 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3217 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3218 } | |
3219 | |
3220 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3221 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3222 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3223 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3224 return 0; |
3225 | |
25012 | 3226 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3227 it2 = it; | |
3228 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3229 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3230 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3231 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3232 { | |
3233 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3234 return 0; | |
3235 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3236 } | |
3237 | |
3238 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3239 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3240 | |
3241 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3242 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3243 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3244 | |
3245 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3246 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3247 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3248 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3249 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3250 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3251 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3252 | |
3253 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3254 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3255 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3256 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3257 while (glyph < end) | |
3258 { | |
3259 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3260 ++glyph; | |
3261 } | |
3262 | |
3263 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3264 inserted ones. */ | |
3265 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3266 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3267 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3268 | |
3269 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3270 { | |
3271 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3272 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3273 } | |
3274 | |
3275 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
3276 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (w->current_matrix, | |
3277 w->cursor.vpos + 1, | |
3278 w->current_matrix->nrows, | |
3279 delta, delta_bytes); | |
3280 | |
3281 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3282 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3283 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3284 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3285 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3286 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3287 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3288 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3289 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3290 | |
3291 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3292 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3293 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3294 and updated_row. */ | |
3295 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3296 update_begin (f); | |
3297 if (rif) | |
3298 { | |
3299 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3300 | |
3301 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3302 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3303 else | |
3304 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3305 } | |
3306 else | |
3307 { | |
3308 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3309 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3310 else | |
3311 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3312 } | |
3313 | |
3314 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3315 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3316 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3317 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3318 | |
3319 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3320 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3321 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3322 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3323 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3324 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3325 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3326 else | |
3327 { | |
3328 int x, y; | |
3329 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3330 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3331 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3332 : 0)); | |
3333 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3334 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3335 } | |
3336 | |
3337 if (rif) | |
3338 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3339 update_end (f); | |
3340 updated_row = NULL; | |
3341 fflush (stdout); | |
3342 | |
3343 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3344 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3345 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3346 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3347 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3348 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3349 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3350 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3351 |
25012 | 3352 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3353 return 1; |
3354 } | |
3355 | |
25012 | 3356 |
3357 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3358 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3359 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3360 | |
314 | 3361 int |
3362 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3363 int n; | |
3364 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3365 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3366 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3367 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3368 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3369 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3370 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, w->last_point, |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3371 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3372 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3373 |
25012 | 3374 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3375 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3376 return 0; |
25012 | 3377 |
3378 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3379 displaying a message. */ | |
3380 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3381 return 0; | |
3382 | |
3383 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3384 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3385 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3386 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3387 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3388 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3389 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3390 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3391 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3392 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3393 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3394 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3395 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3396 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3397 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3398 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3399 |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3400 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3401 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3402 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3403 |
25012 | 3404 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3405 | |
3406 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3407 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3408 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3409 |
25012 | 3410 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3411 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3412 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3413 |
3414 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3415 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3416 | |
3417 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3418 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3419 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3420 else | |
3421 { | |
3422 int x, y; | |
3423 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3424 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3425 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3426 : 0)); | |
3427 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3428 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3429 } | |
3430 | |
314 | 3431 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3432 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3433 return 1; |
3434 } | |
25012 | 3435 |
3436 | |
314 | 3437 |
25012 | 3438 /*********************************************************************** |
3439 Frame Update | |
3440 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3441 | |
3442 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3443 | |
3444 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3445 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3446 scrolling. | |
3447 | |
3448 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3449 |
3450 int | |
25012 | 3451 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3452 struct frame *f; | |
3453 int force_p; | |
3454 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3455 { | |
3456 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3457 int paused_p; | |
3458 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3459 | |
3460 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3461 { | |
3462 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3463 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3464 | |
3465 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3466 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3467 | |
3468 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3469 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3470 update_begin (f); | |
3471 | |
3472 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3473 support. */ | |
3474 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3475 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3476 | |
3477 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3478 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3479 { |
3480 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3481 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3482 |
3483 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3484 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3485 { | |
3486 update_window (w, 1); | |
3487 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3488 | |
3489 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3490 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3491 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3492 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3493 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3494 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3495 |
3496 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3497 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3498 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3499 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3500 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3501 } |
3502 } | |
3503 | |
3504 | |
3505 /* Update windows. */ | |
3506 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3507 update_end (f); | |
3508 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3509 | |
3510 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3511 #if 0 | |
3512 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3513 #endif | |
3514 } | |
3515 else | |
3516 { | |
3517 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3518 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3519 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3520 | |
3521 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3522 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3523 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3524 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3525 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3526 | |
3527 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3528 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3529 | |
3530 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3531 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3532 } | |
3533 | |
3534 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3535 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3536 return paused_p; | |
3537 } | |
3538 | |
3539 | |
3540 | |
3541 /************************************************************************ | |
3542 Window-based updates | |
3543 ************************************************************************/ | |
3544 | |
3545 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3546 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3547 | |
3548 static int | |
3549 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3550 struct window *w; | |
3551 int force_p; | |
3552 { | |
3553 int paused_p = 0; | |
3554 | |
3555 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3556 { | |
3557 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3558 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3559 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3560 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3561 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3562 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3563 | |
3564 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3565 } | |
3566 | |
3567 return paused_p; | |
3568 } | |
3569 | |
3570 | |
3571 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3572 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3573 | |
3574 void | |
3575 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3576 struct window *w; | |
3577 int force_p; | |
3578 { | |
3579 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3580 { | |
3581 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3582 | |
3583 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3584 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3585 | |
3586 /* Update W. */ | |
3587 update_begin (f); | |
3588 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3589 update_end (f); | |
3590 | |
3591 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3592 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3593 } | |
3594 } | |
3595 | |
3596 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3597 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3598 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3599 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3600 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3601 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3602 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3603 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3604 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3605 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3606 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3607 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3608 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3609 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3610 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3611 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3612 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3613 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3614 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3615 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3616 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3617 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3618 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3619 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3620 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3621 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3622 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3623 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3624 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3625 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3626 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3627 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3628 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3629 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3630 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3631 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3632 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3633 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3634 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3635 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3636 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3637 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3638 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3639 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3640 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3641 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3642 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3643 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3644 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3645 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3646 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3647 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3648 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3649 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3650 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3651 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3652 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3653 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3654 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3655 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3656 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3657 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3658 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3664 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3665 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3666 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3669 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3673 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3674 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3678 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 |
25012 | 3695 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3696 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3697 | |
3698 static int | |
3699 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3700 struct window *w; | |
3701 int force_p; | |
3702 { | |
3703 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3704 int paused_p; | |
3705 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3706 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3707 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3708 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3709 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3710 #endif |
25012 | 3711 |
3712 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3713 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3714 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3715 | |
3716 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3717 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3718 force_p = 1; | |
3719 else | |
3720 detect_input_pending (); | |
3721 | |
3722 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3723 the update. */ | |
3724 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3725 { | |
3726 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3727 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3728 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3729 int yb, changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3730 |
3731 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3732 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3733 | |
3734 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3735 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3736 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3737 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3738 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3739 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3740 |
3741 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3742 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3743 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3744 { | |
3745 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3746 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3747 desired_matrix)); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3748 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3749 } |
3750 | |
3751 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3752 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3753 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3754 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3755 ++row; | |
3756 | |
3757 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3758 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3759 { | |
25546 | 3760 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3761 if (rc < 0) |
3762 { | |
3763 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3764 paused_p = 0; | |
3765 goto set_cursor; | |
3766 } | |
3767 else if (rc > 0) | |
3768 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3769 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3770 } |
3771 | |
3772 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3773 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3774 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3775 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3776 { |
25546 | 3777 header_line_row->y = 0; |
25012 | 3778 update_window_line (w, 0); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3779 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3780 } |
3781 | |
3782 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3783 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3784 if (row->enabled_p | |
3785 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3786 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3787 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3788 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3789 { | |
3790 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3791 int i; | |
3792 | |
3793 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3794 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3795 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3796 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3797 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3798 detect_input_pending (); | |
3799 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3800 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos); |
25012 | 3801 |
3802 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3803 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3804 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3805 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3806 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3807 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3808 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3809 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3810 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3811 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3812 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3813 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3814 } | |
3815 | |
3816 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3817 paused_p = row < end; | |
3818 | |
3819 set_cursor: | |
3820 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3821 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3822 if (rif->fix_overlapping_area |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3823 && !w->pseudo_window_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3824 && changed_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3825 && !paused_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3826 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3827 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3828 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3829 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3830 |
25012 | 3831 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3832 { | |
3833 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3834 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3835 | |
3836 #if 0 | |
3837 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3838 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3839 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3840 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3841 #endif | |
3842 } | |
3843 | |
3844 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3845 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3846 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3847 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3848 |
25012 | 3849 /* End of update of window W. */ |
3850 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3851 |
25012 | 3852 } |
3853 else | |
3854 paused_p = 1; | |
3855 | |
3856 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3857 |
25012 | 3858 return paused_p; |
3859 } | |
3860 | |
3861 | |
3862 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3863 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3864 | |
3865 static void | |
3866 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3867 struct window *w; | |
3868 int area, vpos; | |
3869 { | |
3870 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3871 | |
3872 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3873 will be relative to. */ | |
3874 updated_area = area; | |
3875 | |
3876 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3877 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3878 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3879 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3880 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3881 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3882 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3883 } | |
3884 | |
3885 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3886 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3887 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3888 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3889 static int |
25012 | 3890 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3891 struct window *w; | |
3892 int vpos; | |
314 | 3893 { |
25012 | 3894 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3895 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3896 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3897 |
3898 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3899 will be relative to. */ | |
3900 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3901 | |
3902 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3903 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3904 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3905 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3906 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3907 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3908 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3909 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3910 || current_row->overlapped_p |
25012 | 3911 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3912 { | |
3913 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3914 | |
3915 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3916 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3917 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3918 | |
3919 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3920 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3921 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3922 } |
3923 else | |
3924 { | |
3925 int stop, i, x; | |
3926 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3927 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3928 | |
3929 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3930 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3931 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3932 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3933 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3934 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3935 | |
3936 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3937 i = 0; | |
3938 x = desired_row->x; | |
3939 | |
3940 while (i < stop) | |
3941 { | |
3942 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3943 don't have to be written. */ | |
3944 while (i < stop | |
3945 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3946 { | |
3947 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3948 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3949 } | |
3950 | |
3951 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3952 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3953 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3954 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3955 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3956 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3957 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3958 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3959 && i > 0 | |
3960 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3961 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3962 { | |
3963 int left, right; | |
3964 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3965 &left, &right); | |
3966 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3967 { | |
3968 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
3969 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3970 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3971 } | |
3972 } | |
3973 | |
3974 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
3975 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
3976 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
3977 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
3978 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3979 { | |
3980 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
3981 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
3982 int current_x = x; | |
3983 | |
3984 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
3985 while (i < stop | |
3986 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
3987 && x == current_x) | |
3988 { | |
3989 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3990 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3991 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3992 } | |
3993 | |
3994 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
3995 { | |
3996 i = start_hpos; | |
3997 x = start_x; | |
3998 desired_glyph = start; | |
3999 break; | |
4000 } | |
4001 | |
4002 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
4003 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4004 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4005 } |
4006 } | |
4007 | |
4008 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4009 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4010 { | |
4011 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4012 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4013 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4014 } |
4015 | |
4016 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4017 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4018 { | |
4019 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4020 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4021 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4022 appropriately above. */ | |
4023 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4024 } | |
4025 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4026 { | |
4027 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4028 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4029 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4030 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4031 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4032 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4033 } |
4034 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4035 { | |
4036 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4037 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4038 int x; | |
4039 | |
4040 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4041 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4042 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4043 | |
4044 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4045 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4046 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4047 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4048 this way. */ | |
4049 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4050 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4051 { | |
4052 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4053 x = -1; | |
4054 } | |
4055 else | |
4056 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4057 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4058 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4059 } |
4060 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4061 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4062 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4063 } |
4064 | |
4065 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4066 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4067 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4068 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4069 static int |
25012 | 4070 update_window_line (w, vpos) |
4071 struct window *w; | |
4072 int vpos; | |
4073 { | |
4074 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4075 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4076 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4077 |
4078 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
4079 | |
4080 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4081 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4082 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4083 | |
4084 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4085 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4086 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4087 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4088 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4089 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4090 } |
25012 | 4091 |
4092 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4093 changed_p |= update_text_area (w, vpos); |
25012 | 4094 |
4095 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4096 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4097 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4098 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4099 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4100 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4101 } |
25012 | 4102 |
4103 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
4104 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
4105 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
4106 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
4107 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
4108 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
4109 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
4110 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
4111 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
4112 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
4113 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
4114 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
4115 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
4116 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
4117 | |
4118 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4119 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4120 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4121 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4122 } |
4123 | |
4124 | |
4125 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4126 be called from update_window. */ | |
4127 | |
4128 static void | |
4129 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4130 struct window *w; | |
4131 { | |
4132 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4133 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4134 | |
4135 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4136 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4137 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4138 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4139 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4140 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4141 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4142 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4143 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4144 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4145 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4146 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4147 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4148 { | |
4149 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4150 | |
4151 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4152 { | |
4153 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4154 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4155 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4156 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4157 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4158 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4159 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4160 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4161 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4162 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4163 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4164 ++row) |
25012 | 4165 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4166 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4167 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4168 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4169 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4170 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4171 break; |
25012 | 4172 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4173 |
25012 | 4174 if (last_row) |
4175 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4176 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4177 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4178 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4179 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4180 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4181 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4182 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4183 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4184 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4185 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4186 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4187 |
25012 | 4188 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4189 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4190 } |
4191 } | |
4192 } | |
4193 else | |
4194 { | |
4195 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4196 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4197 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4198 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4199 } | |
4200 | |
4201 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4202 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4203 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4204 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4205 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4206 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4207 } | |
4208 | |
4209 | |
4210 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
25546 | 4211 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4212 |
4213 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4214 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4215 O(N) time. | |
4216 | |
4217 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4218 | |
4219 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4220 | |
4221 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4222 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4223 | |
4224 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4225 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4226 | |
4227 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4228 forward and backward. | |
4229 | |
4230 Value is | |
4231 | |
4232 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4233 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4234 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4235 | |
4236 static int | |
25546 | 4237 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4238 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4239 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4240 { |
4241 struct symbol | |
4242 { | |
4243 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
4244 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
4245 | |
4246 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
4247 short new_line_number; | |
4248 | |
4249 /* The line itself. */ | |
4250 struct glyph_row *row; | |
4251 | |
4252 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
4253 struct symbol *next; | |
4254 }; | |
4255 | |
4256 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
4257 struct symbol **table; | |
4258 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
4259 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
4260 struct symbol *sym; | |
4261 struct run **runs; | |
4262 int nruns; | |
4263 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4264 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4265 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
4266 | |
4267 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
25546 | 4268 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
25012 | 4269 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
4270 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4271 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
4272 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4273 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
4274 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4275 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
4276 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
4277 { | |
4278 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4279 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4280 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4281 ++i; | |
4282 } | |
4283 | |
4284 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4285 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4286 return -1; | |
4287 | |
4288 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4289 | |
4290 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4291 desired matrix. */ | |
4292 i = first_new + 1; | |
4293 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4294 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
4295 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4296 ++i; | |
4297 | |
4298 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4299 return 0; | |
4300 | |
4301 last_new = i; | |
4302 | |
4303 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4304 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4305 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4306 disabled. */ | |
4307 i = first_old + 1; | |
4308 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4309 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4310 ++i; | |
4311 last_old = i; | |
4312 | |
4313 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4314 i = last_new; | |
4315 j = last_old; | |
4316 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4317 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4318 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4319 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4320 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4321 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4322 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
4323 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
4324 --i, --j; | |
4325 last_new = i; | |
4326 last_old = j; | |
4327 | |
4328 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4329 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4330 return 0; | |
4331 | |
4332 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
4333 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4334 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4335 | |
4336 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
4337 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
4338 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
4339 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
4340 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
4341 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
4342 | |
4343 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
4344 do \ | |
4345 { \ | |
4346 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
4347 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
4348 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
4349 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
4350 sym = sym->next; \ | |
4351 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
4352 { \ | |
4353 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
4354 sym->row = row_; \ | |
4355 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
4356 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
4357 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
4358 } \ | |
4359 } \ | |
4360 while (0) | |
4361 | |
4362 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4363 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
4364 { | |
4365 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4366 { | |
4367 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
4368 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4369 ++sym->old_uses; | |
4370 } | |
4371 else | |
4372 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
4373 } | |
4374 | |
4375 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4376 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4377 { | |
4378 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4379 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4380 ++sym->new_uses; | |
4381 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4382 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
4383 } | |
4384 | |
4385 #undef ADDSYM | |
4386 | |
4387 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
4388 height of copied areas. */ | |
4389 nruns = 0; | |
4390 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
4391 | |
4392 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4393 in both matrices. */ | |
4394 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
4395 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
4396 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
4397 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
4398 { | |
4399 int j, k; | |
4400 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
4401 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
4402 | |
4403 /* Record move. */ | |
4404 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4405 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4406 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4407 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4408 run->nrows = 1; | |
4409 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4410 | |
4411 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4412 j = i - 1; | |
4413 k = new_line - 1; | |
4414 while (j > first_old | |
4415 && k > first_new | |
4416 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4417 { | |
4418 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4419 --run->current_vpos; | |
4420 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4421 ++run->nrows; | |
4422 run->height += h; | |
4423 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4424 run->current_y -= h; | |
4425 --j, --k; | |
4426 } | |
4427 | |
4428 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4429 j = i + 1; | |
4430 k = new_line + 1; | |
4431 while (j < last_old | |
4432 && k < last_new | |
4433 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4434 { | |
4435 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4436 ++run->nrows; | |
4437 run->height += h; | |
4438 ++j, ++k; | |
4439 } | |
4440 | |
4441 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4442 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4443 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4444 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4445 case. */ | |
4446 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4447 ; | |
4448 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4449 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4450 runs[j] = run; | |
4451 ++nruns; | |
4452 | |
4453 i += run->nrows; | |
4454 } | |
4455 else | |
4456 ++i; | |
4457 | |
4458 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4459 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4460 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4461 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4462 | |
4463 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4464 | A | | B | | |
4465 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4466 | B | | A | | |
4467 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4468 | |
4469 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4470 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4471 | |
4472 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4473 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4474 { | |
4475 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4476 | |
4477 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4478 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4479 { | |
4480 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4481 | |
4482 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4483 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4484 { | |
4485 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4486 | |
4487 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4488 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4489 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4490 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4491 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4492 p->nrows = 0; | |
4493 } | |
4494 } | |
4495 | |
4496 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4497 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4498 { | |
4499 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4500 int to_overlapped_p; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4501 |
25012 | 4502 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4503 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4504 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
4505 assign_row (to, from); | |
4506 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4507 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4508 } |
4509 } | |
4510 | |
4511 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
4512 return 1; | |
4513 } | |
4514 | |
4515 | |
4516 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
4517 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
4518 | |
4519 void | |
4520 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
4521 struct window *w; | |
4522 int on_p; | |
4523 { | |
4524 while (w) | |
4525 { | |
4526 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
4527 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
4528 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
4529 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
4530 else | |
4531 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
4532 | |
4533 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
4534 } | |
4535 } | |
4536 | |
4537 | |
4538 | |
4539 /************************************************************************ | |
4540 Frame-Based Updates | |
4541 ************************************************************************/ | |
4542 | |
4543 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4544 | |
4545 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4546 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4547 should not be tried. | |
4548 | |
4549 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4550 | |
4551 static int | |
4552 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4553 struct frame *f; | |
4554 int force_p; | |
4555 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4556 { | |
4557 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4558 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4559 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4560 int i; | |
314 | 4561 int pause; |
4562 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4563 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4564 |
4565 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4566 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4567 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4568 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4569 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4570 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4571 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4572 |
314 | 4573 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4574 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4575 { |
4576 pause = 1; | |
4577 goto do_pause; | |
4578 } | |
4579 | |
764 | 4580 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4581 |
25012 | 4582 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4583 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4584 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4585 |
493 | 4586 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4587 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4588 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4589 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4590 break; |
4591 | |
4592 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4593 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4594 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4595 |
4596 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4597 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4598 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4599 | |
4600 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4601 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4602 { |
25012 | 4603 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4604 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4605 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4606 { |
4607 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4608 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4609 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4610 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4611 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4612 if (outq > 900 | |
4613 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4614 { | |
4615 fflush (stdout); | |
4616 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4617 { | |
554 | 4618 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4619 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4620 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4621 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4622 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4623 #endif | |
4624 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4625 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4626 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4627 } |
4628 } | |
4629 } | |
4630 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4631 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4632 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4633 |
25012 | 4634 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4635 } |
4636 } | |
25012 | 4637 |
764 | 4638 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4639 |
4640 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4641 if (!pause) | |
4642 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4643 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4644 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4645 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4646 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4647 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4648 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4649 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4650 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4651 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4652 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4653 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4654 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4655 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4656 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4657 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4658 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4659 { |
25012 | 4660 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4661 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4662 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4663 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4664 } |
708 | 4665 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4666 { |
25012 | 4667 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4668 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4669 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4670 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4671 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4672 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4673 { |
25012 | 4674 --row; |
4675 col = 0; | |
4676 | |
4677 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4678 { | |
4679 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4680 must be ignored here. */ | |
4681 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4682 row); | |
4683 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4684 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4685 | |
4686 while (last > start | |
4687 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4688 --last; | |
4689 | |
4690 col = last - start; | |
4691 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4692 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4693 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4694 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4695 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4696 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4697 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4698 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4699 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4700 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4701 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4702 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4703 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4704 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4705 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4706 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4707 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4708 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4709 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4710 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4711 } |
314 | 4712 else |
25012 | 4713 { |
4714 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4715 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4716 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
4717 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0) | |
4718 { | |
4719 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4720 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4721 | |
4722 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4723 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4724 | |
4725 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4726 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4727 } | |
4728 } | |
314 | 4729 } |
4730 | |
764 | 4731 update_end (f); |
314 | 4732 |
4733 if (termscript) | |
4734 fflush (termscript); | |
4735 fflush (stdout); | |
4736 | |
4737 do_pause: | |
4738 | |
4739 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4740 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4741 return pause; |
4742 } | |
4743 | |
25012 | 4744 |
4745 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4746 |
21514 | 4747 int |
764 | 4748 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4749 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4750 { |
4751 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4752 int window_size; | |
4753 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4754 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4755 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4756 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4757 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4758 register int i; |
764 | 4759 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4760 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4761 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4762 | |
4763 if (!current_matrix) | |
4764 abort (); | |
4765 | |
4766 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4767 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4768 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4769 changed_lines = 0; |
4770 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4771 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4772 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4773 { |
4774 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4775 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4776 return 0; |
25012 | 4777 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4778 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4779 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4780 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4781 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4782 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4783 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4784 } |
314 | 4785 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4786 { |
25012 | 4787 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4788 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4789 } |
314 | 4790 |
4791 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4792 { | |
4793 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4794 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4795 } |
4796 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4797 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4798 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4799 } |
4800 | |
4801 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4802 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4803 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4804 return 1; |
4805 | |
764 | 4806 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4807 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4808 | |
4809 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4810 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4811 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4812 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4813 | |
4814 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4815 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4816 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4817 && (window_size >= |
4818 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4819 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4820 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4821 return 0; | |
4822 | |
25012 | 4823 if (window_size < 2) |
4824 return 0; | |
4825 | |
764 | 4826 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4827 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4828 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4829 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4830 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4831 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4832 | |
4833 return 0; | |
4834 } | |
25012 | 4835 |
4836 | |
4837 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4838 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4839 | |
4840 static int | |
4841 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4842 struct glyph *r; | |
4843 int len; | |
314 | 4844 { |
25012 | 4845 int i; |
4846 | |
4847 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4848 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4849 break; | |
4850 | |
4851 return i; | |
314 | 4852 } |
25012 | 4853 |
4854 | |
4855 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4856 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4857 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4858 |
4859 static int | |
25012 | 4860 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4861 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4862 { |
25012 | 4863 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4864 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4865 | |
4866 while (p1 < end1 | |
4867 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
4868 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 4869 ++p1, ++p2; |
4870 | |
4871 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4872 } |
4873 | |
25012 | 4874 |
314 | 4875 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4876 |
314 | 4877 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4878 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 4879 |
25012 | 4880 |
4881 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
4882 | |
314 | 4883 static void |
25012 | 4884 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
4885 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 4886 int vpos; |
4887 { | |
25012 | 4888 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 4889 int tem; |
4890 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 4891 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4892 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4893 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4894 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
4895 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
4896 | |
4897 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
4898 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 4899 { |
25012 | 4900 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
4901 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
4902 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 4903 } |
4904 else | |
25012 | 4905 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
4906 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4907 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4908 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 4909 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
4910 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 4911 { |
25012 | 4912 obody = 0; |
314 | 4913 olen = 0; |
4914 } | |
4915 else | |
4916 { | |
25012 | 4917 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
4918 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4919 | |
4920 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 4921 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4922 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 4923 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 4924 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 4925 olen--; |
4926 } | |
4927 else | |
4928 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4929 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4930 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4931 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 4932 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
4933 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4934 } |
4935 } | |
4936 | |
25012 | 4937 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4938 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4939 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
4940 | |
4941 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
4942 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 4943 { |
4944 nlen = 0; | |
4945 goto just_erase; | |
4946 } | |
4947 | |
25012 | 4948 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
4949 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4950 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
4951 | |
4952 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
4953 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
4954 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4955 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4956 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4957 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4958 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4959 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4960 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4961 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4962 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4963 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4964 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4965 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
4966 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4967 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4968 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4969 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4970 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4971 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4972 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4973 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4974 } |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
4975 |
25012 | 4976 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
4977 return; | |
4978 } | |
314 | 4979 |
4980 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
4981 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 4982 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 4983 { |
4984 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 4985 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 4986 nlen--; |
4987 } | |
4988 else | |
4989 { | |
25012 | 4990 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
4991 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
4992 all the way across. */ | |
4993 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
4994 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4995 } |
4996 | |
4997 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
4998 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
4999 { | |
25012 | 5000 int i, j; |
5001 | |
5002 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5003 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5004 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5005 { | |
25012 | 5006 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5007 { |
25012 | 5008 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5009 j = i + 1; | |
5010 while (j < nlen | |
5011 && (j >= olen | |
5012 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5013 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5014 ++j; | |
5015 | |
5016 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5017 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5018 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5019 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5020 |
5021 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5022 } | |
5023 } | |
5024 | |
5025 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5026 if (olen > nlen) | |
5027 { | |
5028 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5029 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5030 } | |
5031 | |
25012 | 5032 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5033 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5034 return; |
5035 } | |
5036 | |
25012 | 5037 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5038 characters in a row. */ | |
5039 | |
314 | 5040 if (!olen) |
5041 { | |
25012 | 5042 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5043 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
5044 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
5045 nsp = 0; | |
5046 else | |
5047 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5048 | |
314 | 5049 if (nlen > nsp) |
5050 { | |
5051 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5052 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5053 } | |
5054 | |
764 | 5055 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5056 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5057 return; |
5058 } | |
5059 | |
5060 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5061 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
5062 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5063 | |
5064 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5065 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5066 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5067 |
5068 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5069 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
5070 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
5071 { | |
5072 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5073 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5074 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5075 } |
5076 | |
5077 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5078 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5079 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5080 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5081 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5082 | |
5083 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5084 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5085 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5086 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5087 while (op1 > op2 |
5088 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5089 { |
5090 op1--; | |
5091 np1--; | |
5092 } | |
5093 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5094 | |
5095 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5096 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5097 Is it worth it? */ | |
5098 | |
5099 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5100 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5101 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5102 endmatch = 0; |
5103 | |
5104 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5105 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5106 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5107 Is it worth it? */ | |
5108 | |
5109 if (nsp != osp | |
5110 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5111 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5112 { |
5113 begmatch = 0; | |
5114 endmatch = 0; | |
5115 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5116 } | |
5117 | |
5118 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5119 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5120 | |
5121 if (osp > nsp) | |
5122 { | |
5123 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5124 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5125 } | |
5126 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5127 { | |
5128 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5129 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5130 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5131 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5132 { | |
5133 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5134 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5135 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5136 } | |
5137 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5138 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5139 } |
5140 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5141 | |
5142 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5143 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5144 { | |
5145 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5146 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5147 { | |
5148 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5149 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5150 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5151 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5152 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5153 olen = 0; |
5154 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5155 } | |
5156 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5157 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5158 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5159 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5160 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5161 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5162 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5163 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5164 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5165 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5166 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5167 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5168 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5169 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5170 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5171 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5172 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5173 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5174 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5175 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5176 olen = nlen; |
5177 } | |
5178 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5179 { | |
5180 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5181 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5182 olen = nlen; | |
5183 } | |
5184 } | |
5185 | |
5186 just_erase: | |
5187 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5188 if (olen > nlen) | |
5189 { | |
5190 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5191 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5192 } | |
5193 | |
764 | 5194 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5195 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5196 } |
25012 | 5197 |
5198 | |
314 | 5199 |
25012 | 5200 /*********************************************************************** |
5201 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5202 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5203 | |
5204 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5205 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5206 boundaries. */ | |
5207 | |
5208 int | |
5209 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5210 struct window *w; | |
5211 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5212 { |
25012 | 5213 struct it it; |
5214 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5215 struct text_pos startp; | |
5216 int left_area_width; | |
5217 | |
5218 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5219 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5220 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5221 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5222 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5223 | |
5224 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5225 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5226 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5227 | |
5228 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5229 *y = it.current_y; | |
5230 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5231 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5232 } | |
5233 | |
5234 | |
5235 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5236 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5237 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5238 the string returned. */ | |
5239 | |
5240 Lisp_Object | |
5241 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5242 struct window *w; | |
5243 int x, y; | |
5244 int *charpos; | |
5245 { | |
5246 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5247 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5248 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5249 int x0; | |
5250 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5251 | |
5252 if (mode_line_p) | |
5253 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5254 else | |
25546 | 5255 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5256 |
5257 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5258 { |
25012 | 5259 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5260 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5261 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5262 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5263 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5264 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5265 |
5266 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5267 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5268 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5269 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5270 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5271 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5272 { | |
5273 string = glyph->object; | |
5274 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5275 break; | |
5276 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5277 } |
25012 | 5278 |
5279 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5280 } |
25012 | 5281 |
5282 | |
5283 /*********************************************************************** | |
5284 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5285 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5286 |
5287 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5288 |
493 | 5289 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5290 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5291 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5292 { |
5293 int width, height; | |
5294 extern int errno; | |
5295 int old_errno = errno; | |
5296 | |
764 | 5297 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5298 |
764 | 5299 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5300 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5301 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5302 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5303 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5304 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5305 | |
5306 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5307 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5308 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5309 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5310 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5311 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5312 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5313 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5314 break; |
5315 } | |
5316 } | |
5317 } | |
5318 | |
5319 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5320 errno = old_errno; | |
5321 } | |
5322 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5323 | |
5324 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5325 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5326 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5327 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5328 |
21514 | 5329 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5330 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5331 int safe; |
314 | 5332 { |
5333 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5334 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5335 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5336 |
314 | 5337 while (delayed_size_change) |
5338 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5339 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5340 |
5341 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5342 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5343 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5344 { |
25012 | 5345 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5346 |
764 | 5347 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5348 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5349 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5350 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5351 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5352 } |
5353 } | |
5354 } | |
5355 | |
5356 | |
764 | 5357 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5358 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5359 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5360 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5361 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5362 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5363 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5364 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5365 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5366 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5367 |
21514 | 5368 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5369 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5370 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5371 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5372 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5373 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5374 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5375 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5376 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5377 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5378 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5379 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5380 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5381 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5382 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5383 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5384 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5385 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5386 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5387 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5388 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5389 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5390 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5391 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5392 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5393 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5394 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5395 |
314 | 5396 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5397 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5398 { |
25012 | 5399 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5400 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5401 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5402 return; | |
5403 } | |
5404 | |
764 | 5405 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5406 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5407 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5408 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5409 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5410 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5411 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5412 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5413 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5414 | |
5415 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5416 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5417 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5418 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5419 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5420 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5421 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5422 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5423 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5424 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5425 return; |
5426 | |
15078 | 5427 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5428 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5429 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5430 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5431 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5432 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5433 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5434 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5435 |
25012 | 5436 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5437 { |
25012 | 5438 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5439 { |
25012 | 5440 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5441 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5442 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5443 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5444 (newheight | |
5445 - 1 | |
5446 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5447 0); | |
5448 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5449 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5450 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5451 } |
5452 else | |
764 | 5453 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5454 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5455 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5456 | |
5457 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5458 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5459 } |
5460 | |
25012 | 5461 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5462 { |
25012 | 5463 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5464 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5465 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5466 | |
5467 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5468 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5469 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5470 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5471 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5472 } |
5473 | |
25012 | 5474 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5475 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5476 | |
5477 { | |
5478 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5479 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5480 | |
5481 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5482 &text_area_height); | |
5483 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5484 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5485 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5486 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5487 } | |
5488 | |
5489 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5490 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5491 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5492 |
5493 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5494 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5495 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5496 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5497 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5498 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5499 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5500 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5501 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5502 } |
25012 | 5503 |
5504 | |
314 | 5505 |
25012 | 5506 /*********************************************************************** |
5507 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5508 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5509 | |
5510 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5511 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5512 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5513 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5514 (file) | |
5515 Lisp_Object file; | |
5516 { | |
5517 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5518 termscript = 0; | |
5519 | |
5520 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5521 { | |
5522 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5523 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5524 if (termscript == 0) | |
5525 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5526 } | |
5527 return Qnil; | |
5528 } | |
5529 | |
5530 | |
314 | 5531 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5532 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5533 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5534 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5535 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5536 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5537 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5538 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5539 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5540 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5541 fflush (stdout); |
5542 if (termscript) | |
5543 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5544 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5545 termscript); |
314 | 5546 fflush (termscript); |
5547 } | |
5548 return Qnil; | |
5549 } | |
5550 | |
25012 | 5551 |
314 | 5552 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5553 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5554 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5555 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5556 (arg) | |
5557 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5558 { | |
493 | 5559 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5560 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5561 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5562 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5563 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5564 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5565 fflush (stdout); |
5566 } | |
5567 else | |
5568 bitch_at_user (); | |
5569 | |
5570 return Qnil; | |
5571 } | |
5572 | |
21514 | 5573 void |
314 | 5574 bitch_at_user () |
5575 { | |
5576 if (noninteractive) | |
5577 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5578 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5579 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5580 else | |
5581 ring_bell (); | |
5582 fflush (stdout); | |
5583 } | |
5584 | |
25012 | 5585 |
5586 | |
5587 /*********************************************************************** | |
5588 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5589 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5590 | |
314 | 5591 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5592 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5593 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5594 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5595 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5596 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5597 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5598 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5599 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5600 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5601 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5602 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5603 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5604 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5605 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5606 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5607 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5608 | |
5609 { | |
5610 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5611 sec = (int) duration; | |
5612 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5613 } | |
314 | 5614 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5615 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5616 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5617 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5618 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5619 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5620 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5621 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5622 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5623 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5624 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5625 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5626 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5627 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5628 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5629 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5630 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5631 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5632 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5633 return Qnil; |
5634 | |
650 | 5635 { |
5636 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5637 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5638 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5639 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5640 } | |
587 | 5641 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5642 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5643 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5644 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5645 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5646 immediate_quit = 1; |
5647 QUIT; | |
5648 | |
5649 #ifdef VMS | |
5650 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5651 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5652 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5653 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5654 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5655 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5656 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5657 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5658 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5659 |
314 | 5660 while (1) |
5661 { | |
554 | 5662 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5663 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5664 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5665 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5666 break; |
5667 } | |
5668 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5669 sleep (sec); | |
5670 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5671 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5672 | |
5673 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5674 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5675 | |
5676 return Qnil; | |
5677 } | |
5678 | |
25012 | 5679 |
650 | 5680 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5681 it does the redisplay. | |
5682 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5683 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5684 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5685 |
5686 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5687 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5688 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5689 { |
650 | 5690 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5691 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5692 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5693 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5694 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5695 return Qnil; |
650 | 5696 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5697 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5698 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5699 | |
673 | 5700 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5701 return Qt; | |
5702 | |
314 | 5703 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5704 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5705 #endif |
5706 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5707 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5708 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5709 | |
314 | 5710 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5711 } | |
5712 | |
25012 | 5713 |
650 | 5714 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5715 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5716 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5717 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5718 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5719 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5720 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5721 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5722 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5723 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5724 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5725 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5726 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5727 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5728 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5729 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5730 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5731 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5732 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5733 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5734 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5735 | |
5736 { | |
5737 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5738 sec = (int) duration; | |
5739 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5740 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5741 |
650 | 5742 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5743 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5744 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5745 #endif |
5746 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5747 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5748 } |
25012 | 5749 |
5750 | |
314 | 5751 |
25012 | 5752 /*********************************************************************** |
5753 Other Lisp Functions | |
5754 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5755 | |
5756 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5757 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5758 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5759 add length checks). */ | |
5760 | |
5761 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5762 | |
5763 | |
5764 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5765 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5766 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5767 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5768 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5769 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5770 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5771 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5772 the current state.\n") | |
5773 () | |
5774 { | |
5775 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5776 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5777 int n; | |
5778 | |
5779 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5780 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5781 { | |
5782 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5783 goto changed; | |
5784 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5785 goto changed; | |
5786 } | |
5787 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5788 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5789 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5790 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5791 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5792 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5793 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5794 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5795 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5796 continue; | |
5797 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5798 goto changed; | |
5799 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5800 goto changed; | |
5801 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5802 goto changed; | |
5803 } | |
5804 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5805 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5806 return Qnil; | |
5807 changed: | |
5808 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5809 n = 1; | |
5810 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5811 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5812 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5813 n += 3; |
5814 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5815 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5816 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5817 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5818 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5819 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5820 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5821 { | |
5822 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5823 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5824 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5825 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5826 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5827 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5828 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5829 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5830 continue; | |
5831 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5832 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5833 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5834 } | |
5835 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5836 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5837 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5838 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5839 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5840 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5841 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5842 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5843 abort (); | |
5844 return Qt; | |
5845 } | |
5846 | |
5847 | |
5848 | |
5849 /*********************************************************************** | |
5850 Initialization | |
5851 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5852 | |
314 | 5853 char *terminal_type; |
5854 | |
25012 | 5855 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5856 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5857 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5858 |
21514 | 5859 void |
314 | 5860 init_display () |
5861 { | |
5862 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5863 extern int display_arg; | |
5864 #endif | |
5865 | |
25012 | 5866 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5867 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5868 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5869 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5870 | |
314 | 5871 meta_key = 0; |
5872 inverse_video = 0; | |
5873 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
5874 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
5875 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5876 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5877 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5878 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 5879 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5880 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5881 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5882 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5883 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5884 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5885 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5886 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 5887 |
5888 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5889 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5890 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5891 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5892 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5893 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5894 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5895 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5896 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5897 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5898 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 5899 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5900 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5901 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5902 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5903 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5904 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5905 ) |
314 | 5906 { |
5907 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
5908 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
5909 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
5910 #else | |
5911 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
5912 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5913 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5914 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 5915 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5916 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5917 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5918 #endif |
25012 | 5919 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 5920 return; |
5921 } | |
5922 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
5923 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5924 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5925 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5926 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5927 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5928 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 5929 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5930 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5931 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5932 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5933 |
314 | 5934 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
5935 if (! isatty (0)) | |
5936 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5937 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 5938 exit (1); |
5939 } | |
5940 | |
5941 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
5942 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
5943 if (!terminal_type) | |
5944 { | |
5945 #ifdef VMS | |
5946 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
5947 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
5948 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
5949 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
5950 #else | |
5951 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
5952 #endif | |
5953 exit (1); | |
5954 } | |
5955 | |
5956 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 5957 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 5958 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
5959 { | |
5960 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
5961 char *p; | |
5962 | |
5963 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
5964 | |
5965 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
5966 if (isupper (*p)) | |
5967 *p = tolower (*p); | |
5968 | |
5969 terminal_type = new; | |
5970 } | |
25012 | 5971 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 5972 |
5973 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 5974 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5975 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5976 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5977 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5978 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5979 |
25012 | 5980 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
5981 | |
5982 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
5983 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
5984 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5985 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5986 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5987 |
25012 | 5988 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
5989 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 5990 |
5991 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
5992 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
5993 if (initialized) | |
5994 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
5995 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5996 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 5997 |
5998 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
5999 if (initialized | |
6000 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6001 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6002 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6003 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6004 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6005 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6006 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6007 #endif |
25012 | 6008 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6009 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6010 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6011 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6012 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6013 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6014 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6015 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6016 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6017 } |
314 | 6018 } |
25012 | 6019 |
6020 | |
314 | 6021 |
25012 | 6022 /*********************************************************************** |
6023 Blinking cursor | |
6024 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6025 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6026 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6027 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6028 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6029 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6030 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6031 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6032 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6033 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6034 { |
6035 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6036 output routines. */ | |
6037 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6038 { | |
6039 if (NILP (window)) | |
6040 window = selected_window; | |
6041 else | |
6042 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6043 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6044 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6045 } |
6046 | |
6047 return Qnil; | |
6048 } | |
6049 | |
6050 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6051 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6052 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6053 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6054 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6055 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6056 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6057 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6058 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6059 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6060 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6061 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6062 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6063 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6064 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6065 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6066 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6067 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6068 |
25012 | 6069 |
6070 /*********************************************************************** | |
6071 Initialization | |
6072 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6073 | |
21514 | 6074 void |
314 | 6075 syms_of_display () |
6076 { | |
764 | 6077 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6078 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6079 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6080 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6081 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6082 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6083 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6084 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6085 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6086 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6087 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6088 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6089 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6090 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6091 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6092 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6093 |
314 | 6094 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6095 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6096 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6097 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6098 |
314 | 6099 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6100 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6101 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6102 |
314 | 6103 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6104 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6105 |
314 | 6106 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6107 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6108 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6109 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6110 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6111 |
314 | 6112 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6113 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6114 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6115 |
314 | 6116 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6117 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6118 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6119 |
314 | 6120 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6121 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6122 |
314 | 6123 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6124 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6125 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6126 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6127 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6128 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6129 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6130 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6131 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6132 | |
6133 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6134 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6135 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6136 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6137 | |
25012 | 6138 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6139 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6140 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6141 | |
314 | 6142 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6143 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6144 if (noninteractive) | |
6145 #endif | |
6146 { | |
6147 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6148 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6149 } | |
6150 } |